Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Programming Manual
Catalog Numbers 1756-L1 1756-L55 1756-L61 1756-L62 1756-L63
1769-L31 1769-L32C 1769-L32E 1769-L35CR 1769-L35E 1789-L60 1794-L34
PowerFlex 700SSE
Logix5000 Controllers ASCII Strings
Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5How to Use this Manual 5
Chapter 1Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction 7Connect the ASCII Device 8Configure the Serial Port 9Configure the User Protocol 10Create String Data Types 11Read Characters from the Device 12Send Characters to the Device 15Enter ASCII Characters 17
Chapter 2Processing ASCII Characters Introduction 19
Extract a Part of a Bar Code 19Look Up a Bar Code 20
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type 21Search for the Characters 21Identify the Lane Number 22Reject Bad Characters 22Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers 23
Check the Bar Code Characters 23Convert a Value 24Decode an ASCII Message 25Build a String 26
ASCII Character Codes 29
3Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
4 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual shows how to manipulate ASCII strings in Logix5000 controllers This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
middot CompactLogix controllersmiddot ControlLogix controllersmiddot DriveLogix controllersmiddot FlexLogix controllersmiddot SoftLogix5800 controllers
How to Use this Manual Some text is formatted differently from the rest of the text
Text that is Identifies For example Means
Italic the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example
Right-click User-Defined hellip Right-click the item that is named User-Defined
courier information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)
Right-click name_of_program hellip
You must identify the specific program in your application Typically it is a name or variable that you have defined
enclosed in brackets a keyboard key Press [Enter] Press the Enter key
5Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 5
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5How to Use this Manual 5
Chapter 1Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction 7Connect the ASCII Device 8Configure the Serial Port 9Configure the User Protocol 10Create String Data Types 11Read Characters from the Device 12Send Characters to the Device 15Enter ASCII Characters 17
Chapter 2Processing ASCII Characters Introduction 19
Extract a Part of a Bar Code 19Look Up a Bar Code 20
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type 21Search for the Characters 21Identify the Lane Number 22Reject Bad Characters 22Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers 23
Check the Bar Code Characters 23Convert a Value 24Decode an ASCII Message 25Build a String 26
ASCII Character Codes 29
3Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
4 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual shows how to manipulate ASCII strings in Logix5000 controllers This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
middot CompactLogix controllersmiddot ControlLogix controllersmiddot DriveLogix controllersmiddot FlexLogix controllersmiddot SoftLogix5800 controllers
How to Use this Manual Some text is formatted differently from the rest of the text
Text that is Identifies For example Means
Italic the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example
Right-click User-Defined hellip Right-click the item that is named User-Defined
courier information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)
Right-click name_of_program hellip
You must identify the specific program in your application Typically it is a name or variable that you have defined
enclosed in brackets a keyboard key Press [Enter] Press the Enter key
5Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 5
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5How to Use this Manual 5
Chapter 1Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction 7Connect the ASCII Device 8Configure the Serial Port 9Configure the User Protocol 10Create String Data Types 11Read Characters from the Device 12Send Characters to the Device 15Enter ASCII Characters 17
Chapter 2Processing ASCII Characters Introduction 19
Extract a Part of a Bar Code 19Look Up a Bar Code 20
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type 21Search for the Characters 21Identify the Lane Number 22Reject Bad Characters 22Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers 23
Check the Bar Code Characters 23Convert a Value 24Decode an ASCII Message 25Build a String 26
ASCII Character Codes 29
3Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
4 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual shows how to manipulate ASCII strings in Logix5000 controllers This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
middot CompactLogix controllersmiddot ControlLogix controllersmiddot DriveLogix controllersmiddot FlexLogix controllersmiddot SoftLogix5800 controllers
How to Use this Manual Some text is formatted differently from the rest of the text
Text that is Identifies For example Means
Italic the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example
Right-click User-Defined hellip Right-click the item that is named User-Defined
courier information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)
Right-click name_of_program hellip
You must identify the specific program in your application Typically it is a name or variable that you have defined
enclosed in brackets a keyboard key Press [Enter] Press the Enter key
5Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 5
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Table of Contents
4 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual shows how to manipulate ASCII strings in Logix5000 controllers This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
middot CompactLogix controllersmiddot ControlLogix controllersmiddot DriveLogix controllersmiddot FlexLogix controllersmiddot SoftLogix5800 controllers
How to Use this Manual Some text is formatted differently from the rest of the text
Text that is Identifies For example Means
Italic the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example
Right-click User-Defined hellip Right-click the item that is named User-Defined
courier information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)
Right-click name_of_program hellip
You must identify the specific program in your application Typically it is a name or variable that you have defined
enclosed in brackets a keyboard key Press [Enter] Press the Enter key
5Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 5
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual shows how to manipulate ASCII strings in Logix5000 controllers This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
middot CompactLogix controllersmiddot ControlLogix controllersmiddot DriveLogix controllersmiddot FlexLogix controllersmiddot SoftLogix5800 controllers
How to Use this Manual Some text is formatted differently from the rest of the text
Text that is Identifies For example Means
Italic the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example
Right-click User-Defined hellip Right-click the item that is named User-Defined
courier information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)
Right-click name_of_program hellip
You must identify the specific program in your application Typically it is a name or variable that you have defined
enclosed in brackets a keyboard key Press [Enter] Press the Enter key
5Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 5
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1
Communicating with an ASCII Device
Introduction You can exchange ASCII data with a device through the serial port of the controller For example you can use the serial port to
middot read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code readermiddot send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a
MessageView terminal
In addition to the controller serial port firmware revision 31 and greater of the 1756-EWEB EtherNetIP Web Server module supports a socket interface that lets Logix5000 controllers exchange ASCII data using TCP or UDP socket services See the EtherNetIP Web Server User Manual publication ENET-UM0527 revision C or later
Connection from the serial port of the controller to the ASCII device
42237
7Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Connect the ASCII Device 1 On the serial port of the ASCII device determine which pins send signals and which pins receive signals
2 Connect sending pins to corresponding receiving pins and attach jumpers
3 Attach the cable shield to both connectors
4 Connect the cable to the controller and the ASCII device
If the communications Then wire the connectors
Handshake
Do not handshake
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42231
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
ASCII Device Controller
42232
8 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Configure the Serial Port 1 On the Online toolbar in the controller project click the controller button
2 Select the Serial Port tab
3 Select User mode and enter the configuration settings for the serial port
middot Select the baud rate data bits parity and stop bitsmiddot Select the Control Line option
middot For RTS Send Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay
middot For RTS Off Delay enter the delay (in 20 ms units) between the time the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low)
4 Click Apply
If And And this is the Select Then
You are not using a modem
No Handshaking
You are using a modem
Both modems in a point-to-point link are full-duplex
Full Duplex
Master modem is full-duplex while slave modem is half-duplex
master controller Full Duplex
slave controller Half Duplex Check the Continuous Carrier check box
All modems in the system are half-duplex
Half Duplex Clear the Continuous Carrier check box (default)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Configure the User Protocol 1 Select the User Protocol tab
middot Enter a buffer size that is greater than or equal to the greatest number of characters in a transmission (Twice the number of characters is a good guideline)
middot For ABL or ARL instructions enter termination characters to mark the end of the data For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
middot For AWA instruction enter append characters For ASCII codes see the back cover of this manual
If the device sends
Then Notes
One termination character
middot In the Termination Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Termination Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two termination characters
In the Termination Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
To append Then Notes
One character middot In the Append Character 1 text box type the hexadecimal ASCII code for the first character
middot In the Append Character 2 text box type $FF
For printable characters such as 1 or A type the character
Two characters In the Append Character 1 and 2 text boxes type the hexadecimal ASCII code for each character
42252
10 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
middot If the ASCII device is configured for XONXOFF flow control select the XONXOFF check box
middot If the ASCII device is a CRT or is pre-configured for half duplex transmission select the Echo Mode check box
middot Select the Delete Mode
2 Click OK
Create String Data Types Store ASCII characters in tags that use a string data type
If the ASCII device is Select Notes
CRT CRT middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns three characters BACKSPACE SPACE BACKSPACE ( $08 $20 $08)
Printer Printer middot The DEL character ($7F) and the character that precedes the DEL character are not sent to the destination
middot If echo mode is selected and an ASCII instruction reads the DEL character the echo returns two characters ($2F) followed by the character that was deleted
None of the above Ignore The DEL character ($7F) is treated as any other character
42811
42812
orYou can use the default STRING data type It stores up to 82 characters
You can create a new string data type to store the number of characters that you define
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
1 In the controller organizer right-click Strings and choose New String Typehellip
2 Type a name for the data type
3 Type the maximum number characters that this string data type will store
4 Click OK
Read Characters from the Device
As a general rule before you read the buffer use an ACB or ABL instruction to verify that the buffer contains the required characters
middot An ARD or ARL instruction continues to read the buffer until the instruction reads the required characters
middot While an ARD or ARL instruction is reading the buffer no other ASCII Serial Port instructions except the ACL can execute
middot Verifying that the buffer contains the required characters prevents the ARD or ARL from holding up the execution of other ASCII Serial Port instructions while the input device sends its data
For additional information on ASCII Serial Port instructions see Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
For example the device sends s fixed number of characters such as a bar code reader
IMPORTANT Use caution when you create a new string data type If you later decide to change the size of the string data type you may lose data in any tags that currently use that data type
If you Then
Make a string data type smaller middot The data is truncated
middot The LEN is unchanged
Make a string data type larger The data and LEN is reset to zero
42233
12 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
EXAMPLE A bar code reader sends bar codes to the serial port (channel 0) of the controller Each bar code contains 24 characters To determine when the controller receives a bar code the ACB instruction continuously counts the characters in the buffer
When the buffer contains at least 24 characters the controller has received a bar code The ARD instruction moves the bar code to the bag_bar_code tag
bar_code_countEN
ENDNER
ASCII Chars in BufferChannel 0SerialPort Controlbar_code_countCharacter Count 0
ACB
Grtr Than or Eql (Agt=B)Source Abar_code_countpos 0Source B 24
GEQEN
DN
ER
ASCII ReadChannel 0Destination bag_bar_code SerialPort Controlbar_code_readString Length 24Characters Read 0
ARD
42227
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example the device sends a variable number of characters such as a message or display terminal
EXAMPLE Continuously test the buffer for a message
middot Since each message ends in a carriage return ($0D) the carriage return is configured as the termination character in the Controller Properties dialog box User Protocol tab
middot When the ABL finds a carriage return its sets the FD bit
When the ABL instruction finds the carriage return (MV_lineFD is set) the controller removes the characters from the buffer up to and including the carriage return and places them in the MV_msg tag
MV_lineEN
ENDNER
ASCII Test For Buffer LineChannel 0SerialPort Control MV_lineCharacter Count 0
ABL
MV_lineFD
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Read LineChannel 0Destination MV_msg SerialPort Control MV_readString Length 12Characters Read 0
ARL
42226
14 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Send Characters to the Device
When you send characters to the device you need to determine whether you will always send the same number of characters each time and whether you want to append terminations characters to the data
For example you always send the same number of characters and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to always send the same number of characters
EXAMPLE When the temperature exceeds the high limit (temp_high is on) the AWA instruction sends five characters from the string[1] tag to a MessageView terminal
middot The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T charactermiddot The instruction also sends (appends) the characters defined in the user protocol In this
example the AWA instruction sends a carriage return ($0D) which marks the end of the message
temp_high
EN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source string[1] $14251SerialPort Control temp_high_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When the temperature reaches the low limit (temp_low is on) the AWT instruction sends nine characters from the string[2] tag to a MessageView terminal (The $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character)
temp_low
EN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source string[2] $14222401$rSerialPort Control temp_low_writeString Length 9Characters Sent 9
AWT
42229
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
For example you send a different number of characters each time and want to automatically append one or two characters to the end of the data
And then to send a different number of characters each time
EXAMPLE When alarm is on the AWA instruction sends the characters in alarm_msg and appends a termination character
middot Because the number of characters in alarm_msg varies the rung first moves the length of alarm_msg (alarm_msgLEN) to the length of the AWA instruction (alarm_writeLEN)
middot In alarm_msg the $14 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-T character
alarm
MoveSource alarm_msgLEN 5Dest alarm_writeLEN 5
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII Write AppendChannel 0Source alarm_msg $14251SerialPort Control alarm_writeString Length 5Characters Sent 6
AWA
42229
EXAMPLE When MV_update is on the AWT instruction sends the characters in MV_msg
middot Because the number of characters in MV_msg varies the rung first moves the length of MV_msg (MV_msgLEN) to the length of the AWT instruction (MV_writeLEN)
middot In MV_msg the $16 counts as one character It is the hex code for the Ctrl-V character
MV_update
MoveSource MV_msgLEN 10Dest MV_writeLEN 10
MOVEN
DN
ER
ASCII WriteChannel 0Source MV_msg $16136581$rSerialPort Control MV_writeString Length 10Characters Sent 10
AWT
42229
16 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Communicating with an ASCII Device Chapter 1
Enter ASCII Characters
1 Double-click the value area of the Source
A text entry box appears
2 Enter the characters for the string
3 Click OK
IMPORTANT This String Browser window shows the characters up to the value of the LEN member of the string tag The string tag may contain additional data which the String Browser window does not show
42616
42615
Line feed ($0A)
New line ($0D$0A)
Carriage return ($0D)
The number of characters that you see in the window This is the same as the LEN member of the string tag
The maximum number of characters that the string tag can hold
Dollar sign ($24)
Single quote ($27)
Form feed ($0C)
Tab ($09)
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 1 Communicating with an ASCII Device
Notes
18 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2
Processing ASCII Characters
Introduction You can process ASCII characters tomiddot interpret a bar code and take action based on the bar codemiddot use a weight from a weigh scale when the weight is sent as ASCII
charactersmiddot decode a message from an ASCII triggered device such as an operator
terminalmiddot build a string for an ASCII triggered device using variables from your
application
Extract a Part of a Bar Code For example a bar code may contain information about a bag on a conveyor at an airport To check the flight number and destination of the bag you extract characters 10 - 18
Airline Origin Flight Destination Date
Bar code N W A H O P 5 0 5 8 A M S 0 2 2 2 0 1
Character number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 0 5 8 A M S
9 characters
EXAMPLE In the baggage handling conveyor of an airport each bag gets a bar code Characters 10 - 18 of the bar code are the flight number and destination airport of the bag After the bar code is read (bag_readEM is on) the MID instruction copies the flight number and destination airport to the bag_flt_and_dest tag
42808
19Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Look Up a Bar Code For example in a sorting operation an array of a user-defined data type creates a table that shows the lane number for each type of product To determine which lane to route a product the controller searches the table for the product ID (characters of the bar code that identify the product)
To look up a bar codemiddot Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Typemiddot Search for the Charactersmiddot Identify the Lane Numbermiddot Reject Bad Charactersmiddot Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
Tag Name Value
sort_table
product_id sort_table[0]
rsquoGHIrsquo sort_table[0]Product_ID rsquoABCrsquo
sort_table[0]Lane 1
sort_table[1]
sort_table[1]Product_ID rsquoDEFrsquo
sort_table[1]Lane 2
sort_table[2]
sort_table[2]Product_ID rsquoGHIrsquo lane
sort_table[2]Lane 3 3
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
TIP To copy the above components from a sample project open the hellipRSLogix 5000ProjectsSamples folder
43039
Open this project
20 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Create the PRODUCT_INFO Data Type
Create this user-defined data type
Search for the Characters
The SIZE instructionmiddot counts the number of elements in the sort_table array (type
PRODUCT_INFO) This array contains the product ID for each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
middot counts the number of elements in Dimension 0 of the array In this case that is the only dimension
middot sets the Length of the subsequent FSC instruction equal to the size of the sort_table array
The FSC instruction searches each Product_ID member in the sort_table array until the instruction finds a match to the product_id tag
middot The sort_table_search tag controls the FSC instructionmiddot Although the previous instruction sets the Length of this instruction
you enter an initial value to verify the projectmiddot The product_id tag contains the bar code characters that you want to
find
Data Type PRODUCT_INFO
Name PRODUCT_INFO
Description Identifies the destination for an item based on an ASCII string of characters that identify the item
Members
Name Data Type Style Description
Product_ID STRING ASCII characters that identify the item
Lane DINT Decimal Destination for the item based on its ID
To create a new data type
Controller Your_Project
Tasks
Motion Groups
Trends
Data Types
User-Defined
Right-click and choose New Data Type
+
+
+
minus
+
43038
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Identify the Lane Number
When the FSC instruction finds the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the FD bit The POS member indicates the element number within the sort_table array of the match The corresponding LANE member indicates the lane number of the match
Based on the POS value the MOV instruction moves the corresponding lane number into the lane tag The controller uses the value of this tag to route the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
Reject Bad Characters
If the FSC instruction does not find the product ID within the sort_table array the instruction sets the DN bit The MOV instruction moves 999 into the lane tag to notify the controller to reject or reroute the item
After the MOV instruction sets the value of the lane tag the RES instruction resets the FSC instruction so it can search for the next product ID
43038
43038
22 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
Enter the Product IDs and Lane Numbers
In the sort_table array enter the ASCII characters to identify each item and the corresponding lane number for the item
Check the Bar Code Characters
Use a compare instruction (EQU GEQ GRT LEQ LES NEQ) to check for specific characters
middot The hexadecimal values of the characters determine if one string is less than or greater than another string
middot When the two strings are sorted as in a telephone directory the order of the strings determines which one is greater
Tag Name Value
sort_table hellip
sort_table[0] hellip
sort_table[0]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the first item
sort_table[0]Lane Lane number for the item
sort_table[1] hellip
sort_table[1]Product_ID ASCII characters that identify the next item
sort_table[1]Lane Lane number for the item
minus
minus
+
+
minus
+
+
ASCII Characters Hex Codes
1ab $31$61$62
1b $31$62
A $41
AB $41$42
B $42
a $61
ab $61$62
greater
l esser
AB lt B
a gt B
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Use one of these compare instruction
For example
Convert a Value You can convert the ASCII representation of a value to an DINT or REAL value that you can use in your application
middot The STOD and STOR instructions skip any initial control or non-numeric characters (except the minus sign in front of a number)
middot If the string contains multiple groups of numbers that are separated by delimiters (eg ) the STOD and STOR instructions convert only the first group of numbers
For example to convert ASCII characters to a floating-point value
To see if the string is Enter this instruction
Equal to specific characters EQU
Not equal to specific characters NEQ
Greater than specific characters GRT
Equal to or greater than specific characters GEQ
Less than specific characters LES
Equal to or less than specific characters LEQ
EXAMPLE When bag_flt_and_dest is equal to gate[1] xfer[1] turns on This routes the bag to the required gate
42808
EXAMPLE After reading the weight from the scale (weight_readEM is on) the STOR instruction converts the numeric characters in weight_ascii to a REAL value and stores the result in weight
42810
24 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
For example to convert ASCII characters to an integer value
Decode an ASCII Message You can extract and convert a value from an ASCII message that contains multiple values For example a message may look like this
EXAMPLE When MV_readEM is on the STOD instruction converts the first set of numeric characters in MV_msg to an integer value The instruction skips the initial control character ($06) and stops at the delimiter ( )
42620
First value Second value Third value
[Ctrl-F] message F-key F-key action [CR]
Control character Delimiter Delimiter Termination character
42810
Rung A Find and Convert a Floating-Point Value
42810
Rung B Find and Convert an Integer Value
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
The FIND instruction locates characters within a stringmiddot The Source contains the string tag to searchmiddot The Result contains the location where the FIND instruction locates the
search value you specifyThe MID instruction identifies a group of characters within a string and places them in their own string tag
middot The source is the same string tag as for the FIND instructionmiddot The quantity values tells the MID instruction how many characters to
pull from the sourcemiddot The start value is the same as the Result value from the FIND
instruction This tells the MID instruction where to start pulling characters from the Source
middot The Destination contains the characters you located
Build a String This example builds a string that contains two variables For example an operator terminal may require a string that looks like this
middot For more variables use additional INSERT or CONCAT instructionsmiddot If you need to send a floating-point value use a RTOS instruction in
place of the DTOS instructionmiddot The final string does not include the termination character When you
send the string use an AWA instruction to automatically append the termination character
[Ctrl-F] message address [CR]
Control character Delimiter Termination character
26 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Processing ASCII Characters Chapter 2
EXAMPLE To trigger a message in a MessageView terminal the controller sends the terminal a message in this format [Ctrl-T] message address [CR]
When send_msg is on the rung does this
middot The first DTOS instruction converts the message number to ASCII charactersmiddot The INSERT instruction inserts the message number (in ASCII) after the control character
[Ctrl-T] (The hex code for Ctrl-T is $14)middot The second DTOS instruction converts the node number of the terminal to ASCII charactersmiddot The CONCAT instruction puts the node number (in ASCII) after the backslash [ ] and stores
the final string in msgTo send the message an AWA instruction sends the msg tag and appends the carriage return [CR]
42813
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Chapter 2 Processing ASCII Characters
Notes
28 Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
ASCII Character Codes
Character Dec Hex
[ctrl-] NUL 0 $00
[ctrl-A] SOH 1 $01
[ctrl-B] STX 2 $02
[ctrl-C] ETX 3 $03
[ctrl-D] EOT 4 $04
[ctrl-E] ENQ 5 $05
[ctrl-F] ACK 6 $06
[ctrl-G] BEL 7 $07
[ctrl-H] BS 8 $08
[ctrl-I] HT 9 $09
[ctrl-J] LF 10 $l ($0A)
[ctrl-K] VT 11 $0B
[ctrl-L] FF 12 $0C
[ctrl-M] CR 13 $r ($0D)
[ctrl-N] SO 14 $0E
[ctrl-O] SI 15 $0F
[ctrl-P] DLE 16 $10
[ctrl-Q] DC1 17 $11
[ctrl-R] DC2 18 $12
[ctrl-S] DC3 19 $13
[ctrl-T] DC4 20 $14
[ctrl-U] NAK 21 $15
[ctrl-V] SYN 22 $16
[ctrl-W] ETB 23 $17
[ctrl-X] CAN 24 $18
[ctrl-Y] EM 25 $19
[ctrl-Z] SUB 26 $1A
ctrl-[ ESC 27 $1B
[ctrl-] FS 28 $1C
ctrl-] GS 29 $1D
[ctrl-^] RS 30 $1E
[ctrl-_] US 31 $1F
SPACE 32 $20
33 $21
ldquo 34 $22
35 $23
$ 36 $24
37 $25
amp 38 $26
lsquo 39 $27
( 40 $28
) 41 $29
42 $2A
+ 43 $2B
44 $2C
- 45 $2D
46 $2E
47 $2F
0 48 $30
1 49 $31
2 50 $32
3 51 $33
4 52 $34
5 53 $35
6 54 $36
7 55 $37
8 56 $38
9 57 $39
58 $3A
59 $3B
lt 60 $3C
= 61 $3D
gt 62 $3E
63 $3F
Character Dec Hex
64 $40
A 65 $41
B 66 $42
C 67 $43
D 68 $44
E 69 $45
F 70 $46
G 71 $47
H 72 $48
I 73 $49
J 74 $4A
K 75 $4B
L 76 $4C
M 77 $4D
N 78 $4E
O 79 $4F
P 80 $50
Q 81 $51
R 82 $52
S 83 $53
T 84 $54
U 85 $55
V 86 $56
W 87 $57
X 88 $58
Y 89 $59
Z 90 $5A
[ 91 $5B
92 $5C
] 93 $5D
^ 94 $5E
_ 95 $5F
Character Dec Hex
lsquo 96 $60
a 97 $61
b 98 $62
c 99 $63
d 100 $64
e 101 $65
f 102 $66
g 103 $67
h 104 $68
i 105 $69
j 106 $6A
k 107 $6B
l 108 $6C
m 109 $6D
n 110 $6E
o 111 $6F
p 112 $70
q 113 $71
r 114 $72
s 115 $73
t 116 $74
u 117 $75
v 118 $76
w 119 $77
x 120 $78
y 121 $79
z 122 $7A
123 $7B
| 124 $7C
125 $7D
~ 126 $7E
DEL 127 $7F
Character Dec Hex
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM013B-EN-P - July 2008 31Supersedes Publication 1756-PM013A-EN-P - July 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1756-PM013B-EN-P | Logix5000 Controllers ASCII Strings Programming Manual | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 07012008 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = BlackCover Stock = 90 White IndexCover Ink = Black |
| Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
| Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
| This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
| Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
| Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
| IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
| UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
| AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
| BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
| Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
| Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
| For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
| RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1756-PM013B-EN-P | Logix5000 Controllers ASCII Strings Programming Manual | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 07012008 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = BlackCover Stock = 90 White IndexCover Ink = Black |
| Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1756-PM013B-EN-P | Logix5000 Controllers ASCII Strings Programming Manual | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 07012008 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = BlackCover Stock = 90 White IndexCover Ink = Black |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
| 100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
